Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as mechanical equipment. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical. such as duct. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. fixtures. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical panels. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. and plumbing engineering workflows. and piping. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. 3 . Germany. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Add more detailed modelling elements.

The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. On the Contents tab. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. You do not design entire systems. When you install the training files as instructed. when you add ductwork. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you can choose to save your work. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. However. For example. Create schedules. your Training folder may be in a different location. views. and sheets to document the project. as well as how to open and save them. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. and tags. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. such as templates and families. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. annotations. Create detail views. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. When you open a training file. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Metric file names have an _m suffix. to provide a richer and more finished design. In this exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. For example. however. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. After completing each exercise. you learn where the training files are located. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. templates. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. So.

Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 4 Click the training file name. if you open settings. For example. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. enter the new file name. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and click Open. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Accessing Training Files | 5 .NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Project Files (*. click ➤ Save As. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For Files of type.rvt and make changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Save. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. the Open dialog displays. 8 If you have made changes.rvt) is selected. double-click Imperial or Metric. you are prompted to save the changes. scroll down. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and you can open any supported file type. a list of file types displays. and click the Training Files icon. select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. For File name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt. 3 In the right pane.

6 .

In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is one of association or connection. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. You learn the terminology. the hierarchy of elements. drawings. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If you move the partition. the door retains this relationship to the partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. scope. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. 2D and 3D view. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. hence. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In this case. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the operation of the software is parametric. In the Revit MEP model. If the length of the elevation is changed. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. quantities. drawing sheets. ■ ■ 7 . every drawing sheet. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and phases when you need it. schedules. and plans. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the floor or roof remains connected. and schedules required for a building project. sections. In this case. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.

Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. sinks. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. filled regions. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and reference planes are datum elements. For example. tags. tags. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ducts. For example. Examples include detail lines. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. When you change something. and electrical panels. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sprinklers. grids. and electrical panels. They help to describe or document the design. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and 2D detail components. walls and ceilings are hosts. sinks. and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. boilers. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ducts. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. boilers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. levels. For example. sprinklers. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the design. Datum elements help to define project context.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. dimensions.

However. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . programming is not required. from geometry to construction data. If you can draw. families. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and types. you do nothing to establish these relationships.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. By using a single project file. This information includes components used to design the model. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. The project file contains all information for the building design. and drawings of the design. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. section views. you can explicitly control them. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. elevation views. such as roofs. floors. views of the project. In other cases. top of wall. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. schedules. For example. first floor. In Revit MEP. North . You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and so forth). Most often. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. for example. or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Project: In Revit MEP. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. and ceilings.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. To place levels. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Often. you must be in a section or elevation view. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.

although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. System families can be transferred between projects. Then experiment with them. For example. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. a lighting fixture could be considered one family.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. However. such as a 30” X 42” title block. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . A type can also be a style. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. You can also display several project views at one time. each in-place family contains only a single type. and wires. With a few clicks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. pipes. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. showing. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and similar graphical representation. System families include ducts. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Unlike system and standard component families. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). A type can be a specific size of a family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. hiding. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. identical use. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface.

To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.

. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. select the tool first. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. When working on the Modify tab. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. then select what you want to modify. and CAD files. and settings. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. data and systems. project and system parameters. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. architect-specific tools..

application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. provides requested information. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. when adding duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. provides access to common tools.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. For example. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. By default.

such as Export and Publish. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save As) export the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. (Export) On the application menu. select a file to open. (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu... click.. select a template and create a new drawing.

annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. provides views including Default 3D. but is not enabled by default.. (Publish) print the current drawing. saves a current project. and Walkthrough. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Licensing) close the file.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. publish the current project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. or template file. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. or template file. (Print) access product and license information. to. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family. family. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. Camera. To enable or disable a tool item.On the application menu. annotation. click...

In addition. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Modify. repeat the command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. This displays the command history in a list. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. displaying the same information. when you switch to another editing mode. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or the Family Editor. Group. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down.To undo or redo a series of operations. To hide the Status Bar. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. When you are highlighting an element or component. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Starting with the most recent command. check the Status Bar. However. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To show the Status Bar again. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. workshared components. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Clipboard. When you are using a command. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. for example. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Place a Wall. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Modify). Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.To cancel or exit the current command. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. When you place an element in a drawing. To change existing elements to a different type. select one or more elements of the same category. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.

rvt. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 1 Click ➤ Open. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. After you are familiar with these tasks. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. In the following steps. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. click Training Files. For example. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click . 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. When you release the mouse button. In the drawing area. 6 Click in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. on the Navigation bar. the view zooms in on the selected area. Modifying the View | 19 . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. NOTE As you zoom in and out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. To modify or add snap increments. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.

click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. For more information about SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and then using the Zoom tool again. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. moving the wheel to the desired location. click the SteeringWheels tab. press ESC.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. ➤ Options. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and click tin the Options dialog. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. As you move the mouse.

it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Similar controls.HVAC Plan . After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. 2 Enter ZR. These are the drag controls. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Level 2 . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. as shown.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Small blue dots. bottoms. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and select the duct. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. called drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display along the ends.

click the Undo command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 6 On the Undo menu. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . on the Standard toolbar. select the first item in the list. or press CTRL+Z. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move.

In this case. for example. as shown. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. click to specify the starting position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . The duct is moved to the new position. Some commands. and drag it to the left as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position.

click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Click OK. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 13 To end a command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Return. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Press ESC twice. 14 Enter VG. For example.Supply. Select Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.End a command Some commands. such as the Modify Ducts command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. settings. such as coordination review and interference checking. use copy/monitor. the default building levels and standard views. In that case. select Project. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. system families. Finally. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you learn how to start a project from a template. and geometry from the starting template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. link files. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training files. You can choose from several templates.rte template. 5 In the New Project dialog. such as the default project units and settings. click Browse.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. You can either select a template from the template library. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. under Create new. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. and click Open. create and manage views. and loadable families. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as ducts and pipes. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 27 . New projects inherit all the families. and modify system settings. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 6 Click OK.

When you select the material. click Browse. and open North. If you want to use a template other than the default. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. select School or University.rte template and click Open. click Edit. 10 Using the same method. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . navigate to Imperial Templates. NH. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. under Energy Analysis. click (Browse). create another new project using the Construction template. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. For Location. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Manchester. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ ■ Under Create new. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 8 In the drawing area. For example. you can select it now. for Energy Data. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ For Building Construction. review the construction materials listed. Click Cancel. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Project template. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Click OK. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. (Browse). and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. for City. select Level 1. Click OK twice. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog.7 In the Project Browser. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Choose Template dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.

22 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane. click Round. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click Wiring. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. for 3 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. piping. wiring. under Duct Settings. and 12 1/2". Holding CTRL. 5 1/2".rfa and click Open. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and demand factors for electrical systems. plumbing. select Views. 4 1/2". ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and fire protection systems. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 3 1/2". 4 1/2". click Rectangular. 27 Click OK.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. click Sizes. 24 In the right pane. power distribution systems. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 10 1/2". 11 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 33 Click OK. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Pipe Settings. for 3/4". For Categories. 26 In the right pane. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Click OK twice. and 5 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. select Identity Data.

You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. To enable this coordination. From the Positioning list. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. and groups that are contained in a project. select Project. select Sub-Discipline. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Select Ascending Click OK twice.rvt. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. click Training. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. For Sort by. 2 In the New Project dialog. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. under Template file. select View Name.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 5 Click OK. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 38 Close the file. Notice that the file is saved as a template. sheets. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Auto . select Associated Level. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. families. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. In addition. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog.Origin to Origin. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Click Open. under Create new. For Then by. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Linking Projects In this exercise. For Then by. select Family and Type.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

click the My Library icon. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.11 In the Places dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and click OK twice. templates. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click (Add Value). Save. ➤ Open. click My Library. and Import dialogs. and click Open. or families. 15 Under Library Name. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and change the name to My Library. and select it as the library path. Load. and click (Browse).

21 On the File Locations tab. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . such as bump maps. 5 In the text editor.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 3 Under Settings. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 11 In the Options dialog. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 22 Select My Library. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Edit. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and decal image files. (Remove Value) to delete the library. view the current path. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. This path is determined during installation. click OK. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 20 Click ➤ Options. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 9 In the text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click the Spelling tab. select Ignore words in uppercase. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. custom color files. If you want to relocate this path. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 19 Click Cancel. 27 Click OK. click Places. specify the new location here. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. If you work in a large office. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

22 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 24 In the Options dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. In this exercise. under Dimension Snaps. 23 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. click the Spelling tab. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 4 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. delete sheetmtl-CU.. 19 In the Options dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. click Close. 18 Click ➤ Options. 20 Under Settings. and enter 1 . You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. As you zoom in and out within a view.rte. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Edit. 25 Close the file without saving it. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can turn snap settings on and off. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Restore Defaults. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. you modify snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Browse. click Training Files.

such as ZO to zoom out. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. deselect Chain. While sketching. enter SM. click OK. TIP To zoom while sketching. For example. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. If you do not have a wheel button. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.7 Under Object Snaps. 10 On the Options Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. zoom out until it does so. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If it does not. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and move the cursor to the right. snapping reverts to the system default settings. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.

18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 22 Move the cursor downward. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Do not set the wall end point. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 19 Enter SM. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. with or without saving it. and move the cursor to the right. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file. 25 Click OK. Notice that snapping is once again active. and the wall edges. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it will snap to the endpoints. and delete the value 1’ . and specify the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall..

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .

44 .

duct system and a hydronic piping system. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. If the tutorial training files are not present. By following the recommended workflow. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 45 . you will understand the process. After applying a color scheme to the zones.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. However. In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. you first plan the system. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. At the end of the tutorial. go to http://www. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. water source heat pump (WSHP). After finishing each exercise. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and then you create a plenum level. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This system consists of a cooling tower. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you first configure the linked architectural model. As you create the mechanical system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. In this lesson. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you add a level for plenums. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. roof. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. In this section. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ceilings. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.rvt. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. not in the MEP training file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and after the linked model highlights. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. Next. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. under Constraints.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. select Room Bounding. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. click to select it. These components are defined in the architectural training file. NOTE When working with a linked file. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and click OK.

16 Press Esc. For Offset. and in the Plan View Types dialog. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and double-click West . A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. enter 8'. Preparing Spaces | 47 . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and click OK. Click Plan View Types. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). The new level is placed.6 In the Project Browser. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).MEP. 9 On the Draw panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.

Under Extents. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. for View Range. for Level. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. click Edit. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select MEP . and for Offset.Plenum. select Design. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. For Sub-Discipline. Under Identity Data. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum Plan. Under View Depth. In this exercise. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Top. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. For View Classification. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . and click Properties. enter an Offset of 1' 0". right-click Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Cut plane. enter 0. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you can choose to save your work.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. ■ Click OK twice. NOTE After finishing each exercise. for View Scale. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and click Apply Default View Template. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Level Above (Level 3). and then place spaces in various types of areas. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. In the next exercise. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Default View Template.

2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and ceilings). 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.rvt. click Training Files. select Level 2 Plenum. For Space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select New. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 49 . select Horizontal. indicating that it’s the active view. walls. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. For Offset. For (Tag Location). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 14 In the drawing area.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Name. ensuring coordination between the files. enter 219. for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 9 Select the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.7 Click to place the space. enter Library. Click OK. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.

Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. enter 0. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset. select Level 3.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Placing Spaces | 51 . 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.

6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. indicating that it’s the active view. and for Offset. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .rvt. select Level 3. and then press Esc. enter 0. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Space Plan is highlighted. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. for Upper Limit.

14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. as shown. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. enter Corridor. which was numbered 219Q. In the schedule. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.7 In the Project Browser. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 10 Using the same method. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. double-click the space name. and scroll to the newly placed space. and press Enter. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Close the schedule view. 9 In the floor plan. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. change the space number to 216A. the plan view would have updated with the changes.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 18 Close the file with or without saving it.15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 16 Using the method learned previously. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .

you place a space in a chase. If necessary. click Training Files. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.

13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Limit Offset. 6 Enter VG. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Level 3. for Upper Limit. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. expand Spaces. On the Options Bar. For Number. for Name. 12 Click in the section view. enter 0. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. Under Identity Data. enter 4'. right-click. select Interior and Reference. In the plan view. enter 225PC. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK.4 Press Esc. For Offset. select Roof Level. 10 In the plan view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter Chase. click in the chase area to place the space. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . for Upper Limit. and click Element Properties. and then click OK. select the space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. select Space Tag With Volume. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Bounding elements (such as walls. and maximize the view. ceilings. and click OK. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Loaded Tags. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Space Plan. All spaces in the view are tagged. In the next exercises. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 17 Type ZF. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 15 Press Esc. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. floors.

In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.rvt. which removes the space from the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. click Training Files. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . To display space reference lines. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. click View ➤ Zones. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. it is automatically added to the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. click Reference.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.

You work with a single zone until you click Finish.5 In the System Browser. under Energy Analysis. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and a new zone is created. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. To display space reference lines. and Electrical 220 spaces. indicating that the space is occupiable. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can add or remove a space from the zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and click Finish Editing Zone. 4 In the drawing area. Next. and modify the zone properties. select Occupiable. select Computer Lab 222. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The Zone tool is active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates.rvt. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. double-click 121 Cafeteria. click Reference. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to a zone. click Training Files. Using the Edit Zone tab. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning is highlighted. under Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Instruction 221. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. As you do this. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Click OK. Expand HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. select HVAC Zones. To view the zone in the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 In the System Browser. enter 2 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Spaces. expand 2 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it.West .Zoning is highlighted. To display space reference lines. You activated zone visibility in the views. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.TIP After you finish editing the zone. click Training Files. under Identity Data. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Close the System Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser.Area B. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . for Name. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. indicating that it’s the active view.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.rvt. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. click Reference. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Finish Editing Zone. and click OK. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.West . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning floor plan. 15 Press Esc. zoom out.Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 8 In the Level 1 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click in the Level 2 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.5 Click in the Level 1 . Select Attached End.Zoning view to activate it. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. double-click the zone tag. double-click Level 1 . click Training Files. for Name Value. and click OK. you verify the building. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. space. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and zone information. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. Front.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. on the ViewCube.rvt. enter Lounge . click the corner where the Top.Zoning to make it the active view.Zoning view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. In this exercise. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.East.

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Next. Using the Highlight tool. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Click (Highlight). ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). With 109 Lounge selected. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. verify that Wireframe is selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. and select 109 Lounge. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). you isolate the space.

66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . All spaces in the zone display in isolation.■ On the Details tab. select 1_South_Lounge. and click OK. For Construction Type. click . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and then click OK. the space information displays for the selected space. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. For Electrical Loads. click . and then click OK. Next. scroll down in the left pane. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Building> is selected. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the People dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. select 109 Lounge. select Lounge/Recreation. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. For People. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. ■ ■ ■ Next. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.

This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and humidification set point. floors. verify that 70. roofs.00 °F : 54. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. Next. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.00 °F : 90. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This indicates the heating set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. heating air temperature. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. and other room-bounding components. and air changes per hour. For Heating Information. For Cooling Information. This indicates the outdoor air per person.00 °F : N/A is specified. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. click (Shading).Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. cooling air temperature. Below the list of spaces and zones. outdoor air per area. 12 Using the methods learned previously. This indicates the cooling set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. verify that 74. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and dehumidification set point.

select Plenum.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Under Energy Analysis. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Energy Analysis.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Click OK. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select Level 3. For Name. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 0. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 212P. open MEP . ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select Plenum. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Offset. for Number. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Because this is an unoccupied space. click Cancel. 15 In the Project Browser.

you verified building. and select space Plenum 212P. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. For Postal Code. under Energy Analysis. and verify that the space has replaced the void. click in the Value field. For Location. for City. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. enter 03101. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . NH. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. On the Place tab. for Energy Data. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan. select School or University. click Edit.rvt. is selected. click Training Files.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and zone information. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. double-click Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Manchester. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser.

enter 150 Btu/h. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select space Library 219. For Condition Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. and click Element Properties. If. for Building Service. For Sliver Space Tolerance. and then click . 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. or neither. verify that <Building> is specified. select Library . enter 200 Btu/h. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and click OK. For Ground Plane. verify that Level 1 is selected. a cooling load. click Edit. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. select Specified.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and enter 50 sq. and click OK. for Values. For People.Audio Visual. ft. under Volume Computations. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that 1' 0" is specified. Select Area per person. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. this option adjusts the times automatically. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that Occupiable is selected. right-click. 8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Heated and cooled. both. For Export Complexity. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Project Phase. For Sensible. For Building Construction. verify that New Construction is selected. In order to select a space. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Specified. for Values. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. Click OK twice. For Latent. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. click in the Value column. you need to select this option. ■ On the Weather tab. For Space Type.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and under Heating Information. Under Power. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Select the space associated with the warning. For Location. click Edit. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. click Information). for Values. For Electrical Loads. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that <Building> is specified. select Actual. is specified. verify that School or University is selected.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Click OK twice. click Calculate. You should correct the space error in the building model. for Values. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Construction. NH. For Building Service. select Actual. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . select 219 Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. You have verified the building information. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. and can be modified here. and click OK. There should be no warnings displayed. verify that Manchester. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 12 Click the Details tab. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Next.

16 After you review the loads report. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. select 219 Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. or make any changes to the model. For Color Scheme. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. under Energy Analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. or zone information. Click OK. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the loads report. and a loads report displays. 19 In the drawing area.Space Plan.rvt. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. select HVAC Zones. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. space. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 15 Review the loads report for project. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and zone information for the building model. 21 Click OK. weather. 3 In the drawing area. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review.

select Tonnage Range. select the color scheme legend.5 Zoom in to the legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and click OK. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. under Schemes. in 1-ton increments. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme displays in the view. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 11 Using the method learned previously. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.

12 Close the file with or without saving it. select New Construction. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Select Schedule building components. For Name.rvt. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. for Select available fields from. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. select Spaces. click Training Files. more category options are available. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Space Airflow Schedule. select Spaces. For Phase. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.Space Fill is the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.

For Type. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then click Conditional Format. and then click . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. In the Schedule Properties dialog. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Then by. enter Airflow Delta. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Not Between. select Air Flow. enter . select Number. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. and click OK. select Level. Select Formula. ■ Click Calculated Value. for Formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Select Ascending. Header. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Airflow Delta. For Discipline.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. click (Browse). select HVAC. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then select Hidden field. select Level. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula.■ Under Available fields. In the Fields dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. and Blank line. Click OK. For Fields. For Formula.

select red. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click the color swatch. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. right-click to access schedule properties. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. and click OK. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. For Background Color. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model.■ ■ ■ For Value. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. verify that Show is highlighted. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. In the next lesson. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. ■ The schedule displays. In later exercises. In the Color dialog. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Under Conditions to Use. Click OK twice. In this exercise. a view opens that contains the selected space.

78 .

In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. Then. you will create supply air systems. and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. As you place the air terminals. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After completing the air systems lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). After system creation. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and scroll to space 223.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the space crossing lines display. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.

Rectangular Face Round Neck . 9 On the Placement panel. and then press Esc to end the command. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Also.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . select the diffuser. and press Enter. and then select both Copy and Multiple. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and select Supply Diffuser . The schedule updates with the new flow data. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. verify that Constrain is cleared. 17 Move the cursor down. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . If the host element is modified or moved. 13 On the Options Bar. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and press Enter. enter 425 CFM. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for Flow. type 12. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. as shown.

navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag.rfa.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. click Place on Face. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. click Yes. 21 On the Options Bar. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. Next. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 24 In the Open dialog.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select one of the diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 In the drawing area. and click Open. 22 In the drawing area. as shown. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. and then press Esc. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. 29 Place 2 diffusers. As you place the return diffusers.

and click OK. and click to select the lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the return diffusers. select Strong Reference. for Reference. as shown. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Level. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 32 In the Project Browser.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. under Other. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. click Yes. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 31 In the alert dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . For the start point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. ■ ■ For the end point. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and click OK. enter 9' 0"2750. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. click the Level 1 line.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and click View ➤ Systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. After creating the logical connection. When you highlight a space. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . including energy analysis. click Training Files. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . However. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. the space crossing lines display. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.Press Esc. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. You then create the logical connection between the system components. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. indicating that it’s the active view. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.HVAC Plan . right-click the title.

15 Click Cancel. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. On the Options Bar. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. System Name. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. As you add diffusers to systems. 11 In the drawing area. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 12 In the System Browser. and Flow value. Connect Into. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. review the Number of Elements. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. the number of elements is updated. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.

25 Click OK. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. which updates the name in the System Browser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. under Identity Data. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. under Mechanical. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. the air terminals are the children.17 Using the method learned previously. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and the system connects them. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. for System Name. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Rename the system Next. for Mark. 18 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 22 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise.

click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . which provides various layout tools. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the space crossing lines display.Design is highlighted. In this case. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .rvt.HVAC Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. Also. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. select Network. select the upper left diffuser. for Solution Type. and display solution 1. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 4 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Network type provides several solutions. A Generate Layout tab displays. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.

Round. For Flex Duct Type. For Offset. click Settings. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Modify. Click OK. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 3'. For Duct Type. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step. as shown. For Offset. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Maximum Flex Duct Length. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.7 On the Options Bar. Select Branch.

The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.11 Click Finish Layout. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as is the elbow itself. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For example. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution.

14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. a disconnection exists. Usually. select By View. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. If the entire network does not highlight. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. and click to select it. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. highlight a segment of the main duct. Using a flow-based color scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and equipment. for Color Scheme.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and click OK. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. for Values Displayed. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . fittings. thus it is not part of the system. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection.Flow. under Graphics. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. The first time you press Tab. and then click OK. but not all values are used in this view. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.

Airflow. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. select one of the diffusers in the system. and on the Options Bar. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and press Enter. for Flow. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.Velocity. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click OK. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. under Mechanical . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. select the WSHP. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend. and then press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.

29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. for Branch Sizing. click Cancel. and select 16". 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click to select it. Select Only. Click OK.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and drag it to the right. and enter . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Select Restrict Height. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Under Constraints. highlight a segment of the duct.08 in-wg/100ft. select Calculated Size Only. select Friction. Select the upper segment of main duct.

31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. static pressure. and pressure loss. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Use the information that displays (flow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.

Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 35 Click Finish.rvt. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. also known as the critical path.NOTE As you inspect a system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select the WSHP.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.

13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click MEP . for Offset. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click the corner where the Top. 15 On the ViewCube. 11 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector grip.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . NOTE When drawing duct. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. select 9' 10 1/2". Front.3D MEP. and click Draw Duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. select the top right diffuser.

18 Make the floor plan the active view. in space 115. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. it is considered a closed loop. 22 Using the same method. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . the color fill indicates the flow value. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Also. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D.

25 Press Esc.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select the top left diffuser. You can ignore the warning. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and then click Modify. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 30 Press Esc twice. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and click to select it.

This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Airflow. for Flow. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and then click OK. under Mechanical . verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 40 Using the same method. such as a plenum. select a segment of the main duct. under Constraints.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK.

including 2 base mounted pumps.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Create return and supply piping systems. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. In this lesson. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.

on level 3 of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. click Training Files. you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.HVAC Plan . in corridor 328.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Design is highlighted.Horizontal .High Efficiency . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .2-6 Tons .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and select WSHP . as shown.Left Return . 7 On the Options Bar. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. verify that Wall faces is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.

click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that the WSHP is still selected.8 Click the corridor wall face.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. click the dimension. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 2'. and click to place the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown. and in the Type Selector. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the mechanical room.14 Click Modify. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the 2 WSHPs. as shown. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 9'. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. for Offset. enter 12 GPM. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Under Mechanical.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Piping System | 115 . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. right-click the Systems column heading.Mech 330). 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. analyses cannot be performed. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . where it is easier to review the information.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. You can create pipes to connect system components. and click View ➤ Piping.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. Unlike logical connections (systems). indicating that it’s the active view. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. but without a corresponding system. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan .

In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Assigning a system component to an existing system. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that on the Options Bar. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 10 On the Options Bar. This display indicates that the system is selected. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Therefore. select the 2 WSHPs. As you assign equipment to systems. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and the Edit System tool is not active. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select the boiler. while pressing Ctrl. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the drawing area. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. for System Name.

(You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. for System Name.13 Click Finish Editing System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. You have created the hydronic return system. double-click Roof . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the cooling tower. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

25 Select the boiler. and bypasses the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. In cooling mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Expand All. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click Select. indicating the logical connection. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click OK. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In heating mode.22 In the Select Connector dialog. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 28 Using the same method.

The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the System Browser.In the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Column Settings. including the flow rate and size of the component. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. enter 18 GPM. you can view several parameters. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . for Water Flow. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Properties. expand Piping. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click OK. under Mechanical. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Check None. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). select Mechanical Equipment. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. then the Select a System dialog displays. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 10 Click OK.Design is highlighted. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. press Tab to highlight the system. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 9 In the Select a System dialog.rvt.HVAC Plan . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. select CHWR. the boiler.Mech 330). When you draw a box to select components.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. A system preview displays in red. 5 In the Filter dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. you can place the cursor over a system component. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. structural beams. click Settings. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. verify that Solutions is selected. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. duct. enter 1' 6''. 14 On the Generate Layout tab.11 On the Options Bar. or architectural components. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. For Inset. select Perimeter. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. It does not reference the architecture. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 13 Click Cancel.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and the flow for the other is 12. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.16 Click Finish Layout. 19 In the drawing area. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 17 Optionally. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . to display the path with thinner lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the flow for one WSHP is 18. With each Tab. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and press Tab 3 times.

The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical. under Mechanical. 22 Select the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Press Esc. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and access its instance properties. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .

27 On the System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan . the Number of Elements is now 8. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 28 In the Project Browser. which propagates flow throughout the system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you physically close the CHWR loop.Design. click Edit System. Logically. Next.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . On the Options Bar. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. double-click Level 1 . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 32 Click Finish Editing System.

and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. under Mechanical. access its instance properties.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. select a WSHP. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. and click Cancel. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 38 Using the same method. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 41 Click OK. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .40 In the Select a System dialog. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. enter 0''/12''. select CHWS. and then click OK. For Slope. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Inset. Click Settings. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 1' 6''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.

(Both sections are at the same elevation. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown. 46 Click Modify.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 47 In the drawing area. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. To create the piping system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Add piping to close the supply loop. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 51 Click Finish Layout. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. or manually modify the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Either relocate the system components.50 Using the same method. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or offset elevations are incorrect.

click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. double-click 3D HVAC Building. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. and the return pipes are magenta. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt.HVAC Plan . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. As you work in the training file.

7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and press Esc to clear the selection.

and the lower one is secondary. and click Draw Pipe. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the boiler. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 12 In the 3D view. select the return pipe riser. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 13 In the plan view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click OK. The connections are automatically created.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.In a plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 2'. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 1' . for Offset. and you select 1 connector. ■ Move the cursor down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.7''. and press Enter. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.

it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and select it. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. 18 Press Esc twice. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 19 In the plan view. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. as shown. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. As you place piping runs that are close together.

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. 27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. and click to draw the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. click to connect to the pump. 28 Press Esc.

and click Draw Pipe. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 4'. 33 Press Esc. select the primary base mounted pump.

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . type 1'. and click to create the pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 9' 6''. for Offset.

you validate the flow through the system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click Element Properties. right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next. You now have a closed loop system.

notice that under Mechanical. view the properties for the secondary pump. right-click. 46 Press Esc. as shown. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. Connect the cooling tower Next. 44 In the 3D view. In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . for Cooling Water Flow. and click OK. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you create the pumps in parallel. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. under Mechanical. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 48 In the plan view. and click Element Properties. 40 Click Cancel.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).50 or 50% of the Flow. 43 Press Esc. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). select the cooling tower. 41 Using the same method. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 42 Click OK. under Mechanical. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the value is 0 GPM.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

the water bypasses the cooling tower. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). and close the dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise.50 In the 3D View. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select the cooling tower. When the valve is open. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Valves | 143 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Press Esc twice.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. The bypass valve is closed by default. 4 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select Ball Valve . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.

12 Select Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and click OK. 20 Select the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. In heating mode. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). Adding Valves | 145 . right-click. 19 Using the same method. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). under Mechanical. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.

as shown.22 Using the method you just learned. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Initially. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. indicating that it’s the active view. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.Design is highlighted. click Training Files.

7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Pipe Color Fill . click Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 147 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK.Size. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. for Schemes.Flow. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

and enter 2. 13 Press Esc. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Friction. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Select And. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Click OK. for Branch Sizing.25 FT/100ft. and for Velocity. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. enter 5 FPS. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch. Under Constraints. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Using the System Inspector. Either relocate the system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. pressure. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Inspecting the System | 149 . and double-click 3D HVAC Building. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. select a different layout solution. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt. or manually modify the pipe.

NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. An inspection flag reports the section number. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and pressure information including pressure loss. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This information helps you modify the system design. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.

Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and the Pressure Loss is 1. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 9 Using the same method. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. the Static Pressure is 7. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.67 psi. and click OK. inspect Section 6 again. select 90° F.88 psi.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. In this exercise. 10 Click Finish. as shown. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you need to validate them. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. targeting those systems that need attention. for Fluid Temperature.89 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and to size pipe.

Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 9 Right-click CHWS. right-click the Systems titlebar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 7 In the System Browser. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. and click View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 4 In the System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Warnings display. double-click Level 1 . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you have assigned all components to systems. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.Design. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.HVAC Plan . and double-click Level 3 . click Training Files. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. For example. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. and click Show to view all of the system components. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. As you learned when placing components.HVAC Plan . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.rvt. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. After you assign components to a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. If you place components without assigning them to a system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. In the System Browser. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 6 In the Project Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and for pipe sizing. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. the pipe is associated with that system. thus assigning the components to a system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.

11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 10 Using the same methods. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. click Close.HVAC Plan .Design floor plan. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and confirm unassigned system components. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.TIP If you have multiple views open. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Expand All. right-click Hydronic Return. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. otherwise. 12 In the System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and select Level 3 . 13 Right-click CHWR.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

select 75. ■ ■ For Factor. and demand factors that are applied in the design. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. enter 1. You also add a wiring type. expand Wiring . click (Open). Click OK. speeding up the design phase.Wire Sizes. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select Copper. As you place components and create circuits. select Wiring Types. click Training Files. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature. enter THHN. ■ Click New Correction Factor. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. For Temperature Rating. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. ■ ■ For Material. select 90.04. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. distribution systems. select Copper. Select Correction Factor.rvt. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . wiring.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Material. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Custom Colors. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc.■ ■ For Value. Click OK three times.

power circuits. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. First. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. as you place lighting fixtures. Then. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create a panel schedule. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. 167 .

rvt. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.00 fc. select the color legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Click OK. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. for Basic Colors. You can create additional color schemes. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select Average Estimated Illumination. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. By using orange as the color for this range. 2 In the drawing area. for the Spaces Category. click Training Files. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select the color for Less Than 20. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. In the Color dialog.00 fc. select Orange. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Color Fill view is open. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Under Scheme Definition.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.5 fc range. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range is satisfied. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).277. zoom to space Library 219. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Lighting Ceiling plan. 13 Click the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .7 In the Project Browser. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The red field will clear once the +/.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.

170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . the fixtures will move accordingly. 23 Click OK. 18 Click to place the fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 19 Press ESC to end the command. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select the 3 fixtures.

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

277V. and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. Click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . The lighting delta is satisfied. select Multiple Alignment. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 On the Options Bar. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 42 In the drawing area.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.45 Press ESC to end the command. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click Training Files. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open).rvt.

2 Tile the views as shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Lighting Color Fill plan. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting Plan. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .

for Apparent Load. Click OK. select Luminous Flux. Under Photometrics. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.ies and click Open. select T5 [HO]. for Type Mark. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Note the lighting type has changed to F14.93. ■ Click Apply. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. enter F15. enter 162. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Under Identity Data. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.85. click the value for Initial Intensity. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. specify 15000. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.00 lm. In the Name dialog. enter . select 463T5_S. select Xenon and click OK. for Lamp. ■ Click OK twice.277V and click OK. enter . Under Electrical.00 VA. click the value for Initial Color. In the Select File dialog.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Color Preset.

Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.277V.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. select Lighting Fixtures. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click Check None. Click OK.

16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

you add switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. and receptacles to your design. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Junction Boxes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. junction boxes. 2 In the drawing area. Placing Switches. Placing Switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Receptacles | 183 . zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click Training Files.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .277V.

Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.rfa and click Open. The element type Junction Boxes . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Select Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches.NoLoad. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.

Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Level 2 . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 15 Select the junction box. enter 9’0”.14 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Offset. note the Number of Poles is 1. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Mark. Click OK twice. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. NOTE When entering values. 21 In the drawing area. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter JB-1NL. zoom to space Library 219. In the Type Properties dialog. Click Edit Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .

22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. and Voltage. Junction Boxes. Select Load. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. right-click and click Column Settings. 23 In the System Browser. Space Number. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand General. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Click OK. and Number of Elements. Distribution System. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. 24 For any column. Space Name. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Size. NOTE If necessary.

29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 .

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. zoom to the space Electrical 220. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding wiring to a project is optional. and work toward the higher voltage. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click (Open). 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.

9 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . select 120/208 Wye. 14 Select the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Select the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . for Max. For Panel Name. enter 20.Surface: 100A. enter PP-2B. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Distribution System. Click OK. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. click Check None. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. enter LP-2B. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. which is the logical connection between the elements. For Panel Name. and for Category. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Instruction 221. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Filter dialog. enter 20. 20 In the drawing area. for Max.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch.

click Check None. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). for Hot Conductors.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK.Loads. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. except without wire. Click OK. select Wires. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 2. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 41 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then expand circuit 1. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Voltage. Click OK. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 13 In the System Browser. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Distribution System. and verify that Load. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Rating. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing.rvt. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Expand Electrical. expand Power. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. right-click on the Systems heading. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 22 With the junction box still selected. Click OK. under Electrical. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 30 Close the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. change the Voltage to 277V. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel.

Click Yes. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. click below the first one to place it. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click Edit Type. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. for Type Mark. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 47 In the drawing area. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 40 Click OK twice. Click Tags. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. under Identity Data. enter FR4. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .

click Check None. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. for File Name. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. enter a comma. Click OK. Click OK. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. For Circuit Number.rfa. Click OK. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. and for Category. 52 In the Save As dialog. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click Save. and click Apply. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. select Break. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 56 In the Filter dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Next you create a switch system. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.

4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical Lighting. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. for Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.rvt. Click OK. click Training Files. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 12 Select the occupancy sensor. enter a.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.

Lighting. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical . 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Click OK. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

4 In the Filter dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. and for Category. click Check None. lighting. click Training Files. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and data systems. Click OK. Next you create a circuit and size wire.rvt. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click (Open). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 2 In the drawing area. 7 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for power. select the PP-2B panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog.26 Close the file with or without saving it. select Electrical Fixtures.

for Ground Wire Tick Mark. enter 2. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Hot Conductors.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. and click Open. and click Element Properties. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 13 Select the wire again.rfa. Click OK. under Electrical . 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. and in the right pane. and in the drawing area. 19 Click OK.Loads.

25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. and click to select the circuit.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.

and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.26 Press Delete. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the connector of the first receptacle. 28 In the drawing area. 29 In space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

Next you balance the loads for your design. select panel LP-2B. click Training Files. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Finally. 3 In the Electrical space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 2 In the drawing area. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. zoom to space Electrical 220. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.

The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . for Rating. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 6 Click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Phase B 3636 VA. Notice that the loads on Phase A. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#10. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#12. and Phase C . while Phase B provides 2004 VA.3712 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#10. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Under Electrical-Loads.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. enter 30A. Click OK. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Scroll down. B. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. 1-#12.3616 VA).

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 17 Close the warning dialog.15 Select panel PP-2B. Select PP-2B. enter 30A. and click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. and click OK. Next you create a panel schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.rvt. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . for Rating. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Training Files. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Loads. for Rating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. enter 25A. click (Open). Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.

click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. click Edit. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 3/32.Panel Schedules. for Font. select Bold and Italic. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 In the Project Browser. and open E601 . under Other. 7 Select the schedule. expand Sheets (all). 4 Close the report. Under Header Text. for Font Size. select Berlin Sans FB. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Body Text. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Appearance. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. Under Header Text. for Font Size. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 1/8. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 11 Click OK twice.

and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Expand Unassigned. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. press TAB once. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. each with a load of 180VA. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. select space Lounge 212. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. In the System Browser. Checking Your Design | 215 . 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once.

17 In the drawing area. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. select MDP-1. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 16 Close the details dialog. under Warnings. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. for Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 15 In the dialog. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. zoom to space Electrical 214. 20 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

click Training Files. Adding a pipe size. you create a PVC pipe type.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 219 . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. planning is critical to a successful design. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. In this exercise.Vent. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and click Properties. right-click PVC .Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and click OK. in addition to loading existing families. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Sanitary. type PVC . and verify that Level 1 .

select Plastic. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.5 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 22 Click New Size. 10 On the Selection panel.PVC . enter -4' . select None. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. for Nominal.DWV: Standard. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 17 In the left pane. and click OK.Sch 40 . enter 10°.Sch 40 . select Tee Vent . For Offset. select Tee. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. for Material. click Modify.PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 1/2''. 21 In the right pane. click Pipe Settings. 18 For System Type. 6 Click OK. Tap. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . PVC .PVC . and click Main. select Sanitary.DWV: Standard.Vent is listed. In the Project Browser. Cross.DWV. select Sanitary. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.rfa. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. under Pipe Types. select Branch.Sch 40 . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 27 For the new pipe size. 25 For Outside. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 13 In the right panel.0''. enter 5/8''. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. under Mechanical. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. enter 27/32''. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 15 For System Type. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Tee. click Training Files. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 24 For Inside Diameter. 26 Click OK. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. add a hot water heater. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the cold water system. including plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. 221 . and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the hot water system. sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. vent.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

including the men’s room (space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . 1 urinal. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. you add 2 toilets. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. and verify that Level 1 . NOTE To identify a space name and number.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. click Training Files.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

1 wall-mounted urinal.Flush Valve . select Public . as shown. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and 3 sinks. in the Type Selector. under Water Closet .1. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Wall Mounted. 5 On the Placement panel. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. against the left wall.6 gpf. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 4 On the Element panel.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . above the first in the standard toilet space. use the reference line to center the fixture. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.Wall Hung. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. and press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. zoom in closer.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc. under Urinal . (Again.

click Place on Face. In placing the fixture. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. under Floor Drain .2'' Drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 12 On the Placement panel.Rectangular.

21 Close the file with or without saving it. and Default Domestic Cold Water. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).rvt. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and click View ➤ Piping. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and a floor drain. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and review the components listed under this system. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 19 Expand Default Sanitary. a urinal. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 8 In the Filter dialog. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 2 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and verify that Level 1 . and click OK. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 6 In the plan view. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. so the Create Sanitary System is available. If you deselected the drain. expand Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 In the Systems Browser. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You include the bathroom space number in the name. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. click Finish Editing System. 11 On the Options Bar. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. for System Name. 12 On the Edit System panel.

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. A preview of the piping layout displays. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select one of the components in the system. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select Sanitary 107. for example. a toilet. and click OK. The base is placed. as shown.

enter -1' 0''. and for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 25 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Intersections. select Main. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and modify it to meet project requirements. 23 For Offset. for Diameter. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. click Solutions. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. and click Settings. You accept this suggested solution. enter -4'-0”. and click OK. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 21 On Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. 24 In the left pane. for Solution Type. for Slope. select 4''. 26 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. The default settings are automatically modified. select Branch.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify.30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . under Lavatory . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. in the Type Selector.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 5 On the Placement panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Public. click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and verify that Level 1 . as shown. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 22''x22'' . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Plumbing Plan .Design is open.

7 Click Modify. For example. enter 2' 4''. TIP When entering dimensions. 8 Select the sink. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. On the Options Bar. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink.

14 On the Edit Piping System panel. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Add To System. 12 In the drawing area. and press Enter to create the third sink. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 15 Click the 3 sinks. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Finish Editing System. 16 On the Edit System panel. 11 In the System Browser.

as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 20 Select the fitting. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Pipe. 22 In the plan view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 21 Select the tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view. with the tee fitting selected. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. double-click 3D Plumbing. 19 In the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .In the System Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).

piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Slope. enter 1/8'' / 12''. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. When you press the Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. press Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 2' .23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. In this example. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.6''. and click Apply.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 31 Click Modify. move the cursor over the stub pipe. click to place the fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . under Wye 45 Deg Double . 30 In the 3D view. and when the vertical center line displays. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 29 In the Type Selector.PVC . select Standard.

zoom in to the double wye fitting. In the next steps. enter 6''. right-click the right connector. 36 In the section view. on the Options Bar. 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1'. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and click Draw Pipe. double-click the section head to open the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown. 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe.

and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 48 Click Modify. press Spacebar. 49 Using the same method. enter 6''. 46 In the section view. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

DWV. 51 In the Type Selector. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.Sch 40 . 52 In the plan view. select Standard.PVC . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 55 In the 3D view. select the P-Trap on the left.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Trap P . 53 Using the same method. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .

Move the cursor to the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. enter 6''. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. connect the right sink to the double wye. Select the double wye pipe on the left. and press Enter. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click in the plan view. select the left P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe.

while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.■ In the 3D view. as shown. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select a proposed solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select PVC Sanitary. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. under Pipe Types. Press Esc. In the Type Selector. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. for Slope. click Training Files. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and verify the slope. click Finish. adjusting the sanitary stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .Plumbing Plan . as shown.Design. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view.Floor level line. right-click the top connector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.PVC . 7 On the Selection panel.DWV. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Overall. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the vertical stack. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Standard. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and click to draw the pipe. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Pipe. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 3 In the Section view. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Design. 5 Select the tee. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. select the elbow fitting on the right.

for Offset. 18 In the plan view. 15 Press Esc.PVC . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. select Standard. 17 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .DWV. 12 Select the fitting. 13 Click the rotate control once.11 Click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1'-0”. under Plug . Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. as shown.

you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.19 Click Modify. click Training Files. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.Plumbing Plan .

and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 6 In the left pane. urinal. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. and click Main. 14 In the System Browser. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. expand Unassigned. select Domestic Cold Water. and click OK. click Check None. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Branch. and for System Type. 4 In the right pane. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. double-click 3D Plumbing . enter 9' 3''. select Pipe Types: Water.Design ➤ 3D Views. For Offset. 7 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. For Offset. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 In the Filter dialog. 15 In the plan view.) 10 Click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. select Branch. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Pipe Types: Water.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for System Type. and sinks. select Domestic Hot Water.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . for System Type. 9 In the left pane. select Main. minimize the Sanitary system. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. if necessary. draw a selection box to select the toilets. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing Fixtures. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.

indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Edit System. 21 On the Edit System panel. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. click Finish Editing System. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. enter DCW 107. 19 On the System Tools panel. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. In the System Browser. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. For Flow Conversion Method. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components.

as shown. for Offset. 36 Move the cursor to the left. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 37 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. for Offset. 33 Click Modify. right-click the top DCW connector. under Pipe Types. select Water. 32 Move the cursor to the right. select 3/4''. 34 In the plan view. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. enter 0”/12”. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. connect the second toilet. and press Enter. click to the left of the urinal. and press Enter. and click to place the pipe. enter 4'0”. 30 In the plan view. enter 10'. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. enter 3' . verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. For Offset. as shown. enter 7''.25 Using the same method.2 7/8''. For Slope. and click Draw Pipe. select the sink above the urinal. 35 In the Type Selector. and click the connector. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor to the left. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 41 Select the top sink. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click OK. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.44 Using the same method. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the hot water system.

select the 3 sinks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view. while pressing Ctrl. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Overall.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. expand the Unassigned folder. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. you edit the system to add equipment. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Default Domestic Cold Water. 10 In the System Browser. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 15 In the System Browser. select 0. under Water Heater . 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the Type Selector. in the Unassigned folder.Tankless. as shown. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. When designing systems. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. verify that DCW 107 is selected. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.6 Gallon. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click OK. 13 In the plan view. for System Name. and click Edit System. Default Domestic Hot Water. In later steps. 14 Click Modify. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories).

as shown. and press Enter. 27 Click Modify. click Finish Editing System. 24 Move the cursor up. 26 Move the cursor to the right. and click the water main line. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. Offset: 4' 6''. Slope: 0''/12''. right-click the middle left connector. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. enter 1' 6''. 22 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit System panel. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. select the water heater. for Offset. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and select Draw Pipe. enter 10’. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . verify that Automatically Connect is selected. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and press Enter. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. select 4'-6''. 37 On the Options Bar. 30 On the System Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Edit System. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1''. click Finish Editing System. for Offset. as shown. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1' 6''. select a sink. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. enter 9' 0''. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and for Offset. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and on the Placement Tools panel. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 Move the cursor down. 35 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. and in the System Selector.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 42 Click Modify. for Offset. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 2' 8''. enter 1’. as shown. and click just above the bottom sink. 41 Move the cursor down.39 Move the cursor down. and press Enter.

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. and click Duplicate. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.autodesk. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In this tutorial. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 267 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. However.rvt. 2 Right-click Standard.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. go to http://www.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You create a new pipe type.

and click Properties. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. and enter Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. under Mechanical. you create project parameters and work with schedules. In the left pane. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 6 In the Project Browser. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. structural beams. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. or architectural components. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 9 Click OK. In this exercise. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). verify that 9' 0" is selected. select Fire Protection Wet. However. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. duct. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. for Material. select Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Main. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For Offset. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and then click OK. In the next exercise. For System Type. Next. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. For System Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For Pipe Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.

6 In the drawing area. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Using a crossing window.Fire Protection Plan . and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Name. and then click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. select space Instruction 221 as shown. right-click. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Design is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space using the cursor. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. enter Sprinkler Zone. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. click Training Files. select Fire Protection. 5 Click OK twice. For Group parameter under. enter Zone 1. select Spaces. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Under Categories. select the upper half of the building.rvt.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then access instance properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. including a calculated value parameter.rvt. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Zone 2. 13 Using the same method. click Training Files. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. for Sprinkler Zone. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. to which you add various parameters. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click OK. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. 10 In the Filter dialog.

For Key name. Click OK. In the Maximum Spacing column. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan . For Type of Parameter. For Name. and on the ribbon. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 9 On the Formatting tab. 10 In the Format dialog.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. select Maximum Spacing. 11 Click OK twice. enter 15. 6 Using the same method. enter Maximum Spacing. 14 Select the new header. enter Protection Area Construction Type. for Name.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Rounding. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. and click Field Format.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click on each column separator. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. click the Formatting tab. enter Light. Obstructed-Combustible. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Units. select Spaces. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. select Fire Protection. select Feet and fractional inches. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select To the nearest 1'. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Add Parameter. select Length. Select Schedule keys. For Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. select Spaces. and press Enter. Unobstructed Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. based on the parameter settings you specified previously.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. enter 130. For Name. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. under Available fields.

click Edit. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Minimum Sprinklers. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. In the Fields dialog. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Header and Blank line. For Type. and click Field Format. 19 Click the Formatting tab. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select 0 decimal place. Click OK. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Discipline. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Fixed. select Number. Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Units. for Sort by. enter Minimum Sprinklers. under Other. select Sprinkler Zone. For Formula. and click OK. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 22 Click OK twice. For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . click . and click View Properties. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Level. For Then by. select Common.

For Fields. for Filter by. 26 Click OK 3 times. For Fields.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. At the bottom of the dialog. ■ In the Format dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. select Grand totals. select Minimum Sprinklers. 27 In the drawing area. verify that Use default settings is selected. and then select Hidden field. for Filter. select Sprinkler Zone. and then click Field Format. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Level equals Level 2. right-click the schedule. For Then by (second instance). select Level. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 30 Click OK twice. select Hidden field. select Number. and select Totals only. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and click View Properties. click Edit. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.

For Category. select Embedded Schedule. under Other. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. double-click Type. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Fields. select Count. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and Count. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. System Name. and select Totals only. delete the word Maximum. click Edit. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Formatting tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. Under Field formatting. for Available fields. select Calculate totals. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Embedded Schedule. select Grand totals.

45 For Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 46 With the space still selected. 41 In the plan view. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan Design.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. for Protection Area Construction Type. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. As a result. 50 Access the instance properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and click OK. under Identity Data. and access the instance properties. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 44 In the schedule. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select Light. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Unobstructed. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the floor plan. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. but their values are not determined. double-click FP . and the spacing parameter values are evident. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 43 Click Cancel. select Ordinary. select space 221 Instruction. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. select Ordinary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Unobstructed.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. go to http://www. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. click Training Files. you can choose to save your work. However. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.autodesk. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 279 . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. After finishing each exercise.rvt. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. As you place the sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you will understand the process. methodology. By following the recommended workflow. As you create the system. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

When this happens. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. After placing the initial sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. select the sprinklers that you placed. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 9 In space Instruction 202. 11 In the drawing area. 10 Press Esc twice.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Pendent . Adding Sprinklers | 281 .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Sprinkler . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown.

the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 13 On the Options Bar. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and then press Esc. Also. as shown. you place non-hosted sprinklers. verify that Constrain is cleared. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.

19 In the floor plan. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 200B.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Notice that the schedule updates. and click Element Properties. move the cursor to the right. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. under Constraints. 29 Press Esc. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 18 Type WT. enter 11. specify a vertical offset. and press Enter. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 25 Click OK. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. you place non-hosted sprinklers. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.FP_Ceiling view. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. For Number. you adjust the offset. Next. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. enter 10' 6". open Design ➤ FP . Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 14' 6". and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. and 200C). 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 17 In the Project Browser. This number is determined in the schedule.Fire Protection Plan .

Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. In this exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. click Training Files. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and with piping (physical connection). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Unlike logical connections (systems).30 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. In the next exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). and then creating the logical connection between these system components. After creating the logical connection. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.Fire Protection Plan . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. However.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.

4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. within the Piping Systems folder. 5 Right-click the header. as shown.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Creating a Piping System | 285 . The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. click View ➤ Systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems. In the System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and select Piping. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.

Next. and select the system. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and number of elements in the system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 19 Click OK. For Offset. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. for System Name. 14 Click Finish Editing System. system equipment. indicating the logical connection. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 13 In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 15 In the drawing area. In the left pane. 12 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over a sprinkler. verify that Main is selected.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and a piping layout preview displays. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. The Edit Piping System panel displays. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. press Tab. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Branch. select an initial piping layout. and click Select. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.Wet is selected. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. providing system editing tools. For Pipe Type. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. click Settings. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected.

these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected. select 2". click Solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . In general. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. When the layout is finished. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and select solution 5. as shown. 23 For Offset. 22 On the Options Bar. enter -12' 0". The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and green represents branch lines). click Place Base. for Diameter. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component.

28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. On the Generate Layout panel. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. 29 Click Finish Layout.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and various manual pipe creation tools. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. select a different layout solution. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Either relocate the system components. 32 If necessary. and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Next. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or that offset elevations are incorrect.

Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 2 Zoom in. 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files.Design is highlighted.rvt. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 3 If necessary. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 11 On the Generate Layout panel. for Solution Type. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. 9 On the Edit System panel. radiators. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . air terminals. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and select solution 5. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 14 Close the System Browser. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. and pipe or duct is created. verify that Solutions is selected. mechanical equipment. click Add To System. 13 Click Finish Layout. 5 In the drawing area. 8 In the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. or a system component to display system tools. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. and so on) are logically connected by a system.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. you can select the pipe or duct. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. verify that Network is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 12 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system.

21 In the Piping Plan. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 28 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and then tile the views. 24 In the Piping Plan. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and click Draw Pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and then press Esc. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 27 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 25 Select the sprinkler.20 Open Design ➤ FP . zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 29 Using the same method. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. select 9'. right-click.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

■ 6 Press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4" = 1'-0".rvt.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. for Scale.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. select 4".21 On the Options Bar.

select 1 1/4". The pipe diameter is modified. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 25 On the Options Bar. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 26 Using the same method. as shown. 24 In the drawing area. and then tag the piping as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and maximize the floor plan. 23 Close the 3D view.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You added tags to pipes. For additional practice. In this tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. create details.

306 .

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. dependent views. matchlines. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. 307 . Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and apply a view template. If the view included detail graphics. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click Properties. and view references. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. and click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. under Floor Plans. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.

views and put them on the sheet. 4 Using the same method. and click OK. as shown. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. more focused. and then press Esc. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Rename. 10 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. create dependent views for areas B and C. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click OK. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties.

select Double Dash 5/8". and click OK. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog./ ---). select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 20 Select the upper view reference and. click the current value. 13 Press Esc twice. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 21 Using the same method. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select 11.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Click OK. select black. for Target view. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . and then press Esc. For Line Weight. For Line Pattern. In the Color dialog. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 19 In the drawing area. on the Options Bar.

25 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. and zoom to each of the view references. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. as shown. 27 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

click Training Files. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for View Classification.Domestic Water. Click OK. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click 3D Plumbing. Under Graphics. and click Apply Default View Template. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. for View Name. select Plumbing Isometric.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Domestic Water. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run.rvt. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and select the section box. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . The section crop lines no longer display. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click to select it. select Documentation. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. For Sub-Discipline. select Plumbing. and click Properties. enter Plumbing Isometric .

312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select 3. select Dash. and click to select it. For Pattern. 12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. press Tab 3 times. Click Apply. and then click OK. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). 14 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Domestic Water view with detailing. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Reveal Hidden Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .15 Press Esc. On the View Control Bar. On the View Control Bar. press Tab 3 times. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and click to select it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.Sanitary Waste. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. In the drawing area. Right-click.

verify that Common is selected. In the Format dialog. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. as shown. select To the nearest 1/8". 25 Press Esc twice. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 21 Click OK twice. For Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 . for Rounding. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. click on the Format value. When the view is associated with a sheet. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and then place the callout view on a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view.

select 1/4"=1'-0''. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.rvt. for Scale.

■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Creating Callout Views | 317 . under Sheets (all). Click OK. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. double-click M601 . using the same method. drag it to the sheet. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. for Line Weight. select 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.

For Title on Sheet.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply Default View Template. for View Name. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Click OK. and select the viewport.

Creating Callout Views | 319 . 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click Apply View Template. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. under Names. and click Rename. 25 In the Project Browser. enter Typical WSHP Detail.

symbols. duct tags. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. 321 . ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you learn how to: ■ add text notes.

double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Creating Annotations In this exercise. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. as shown. 8 With the text still selected. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.

a segment of round duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and then click Right Straight.9 Press Esc twice. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct. Creating Annotations | 323 . Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. select a supply diffuser.

Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. clear Leader. and click OK. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. for Ducts. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click Open. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 17 Click Modify. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa. If necessary. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. click Load. 22 In the Tags dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round.

and then press Esc. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Leader. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 32 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.25 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Creating Annotations | 325 . 26 On the Options Bar. as shown.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End. for Leader. as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Creating Dimensions | 327 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. not simply an instance property. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.36 Press Esc twice. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously. select the last tag placed. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. select Dot Open 1/16". you use temporary dimensions to locate. and lock lighting fixtures. for Leader Arrowhead. and all elements of that type are affected. 37 In the drawing area. and click OK. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. That’s because you changed a type property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. lay out.

9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 12 Press Esc.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. On the Options Bar. click Training Files. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.rvt. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. and then select the interior face of the wall. select the dimension line. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control.

18 Select the dimension value (7' . 16 Press Esc. enter 8'. and offset them 8' from the wall. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend In this exercise. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. linework. and press Enter. Creating a Legend | 329 .3 1/2"). add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 19 Using the same methods. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Because the dimensions are locked. annotation symbols. and notes. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.13 Using the same method. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.

■ 9 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.rvt. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Floor Plan. Click OK. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For Scale. select 1/4" = 1' -0". place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click in the drawing area.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .8 Neck. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click below the title to place the diffuser. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Diffuser Legend. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 331 .11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

22 Zoom in to the copied component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and then press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 26 Press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 21 Press Esc.

enter E.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.30 Select Spot Elevation . 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 34 Using the method learned previously. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . Creating a Legend | 333 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and text. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A detail callout that references another view. A drafting view using detail components. detail groups.rvt. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 335 . indicating that it’s the active view.

and then modify and align the views. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 5 In the drawing area. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select each of the 2 panelboards. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.113 East on the sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Next.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. place Power Riser . and click to place it. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 Using the same method. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. 7 Drag the Power Riser .

15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. under Identity Data. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 .9 Press Esc. and click OK. giving the appearance of a single view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Deactivate View. 13 Right-click. for Title on Sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Activate View.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click. 22 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. you add wiring to the diagram. In the next exercise. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. right-click. select the 113 East elevation view. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 21 Using the drag control. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and click Activate View. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files.rvt. verify that Chain is selected. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. as shown. As you draw. for Name. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Beginning at the transformer. enter Electrical Power. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. In the New Subcategory dialog. notice that there are no snaps active.113 North view. and click OK. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the Line Styles dialog. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click New. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. select 6. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Under Modify Subcategories. 2 Close the Project Browser. expand Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. for Line Weight. and then click OK. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser .

for Offset. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. enter 1/8". 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar.

Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 29 Click Modify. as shown. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 28 Click above the cap. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .

31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple.

39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 3/32". enter 0 0. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and then press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . You enter exact values for each line length.5. 40 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.36 Press Esc. and press Enter. for Offset. 42 On the Options Bar.

47 In the drawing area.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 50 With the group selected. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Press Esc.25. 46 In the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Using the same method. for Name. and click OK. while pressing Ctrl. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. enter Ground. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. select all 3 lines. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. and press Enter. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. click on the length dimension value. enter 0 0. and then press Esc. you can ensure that they stay together.125. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.

TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .51 Using the method learned previously.

enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Rename. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and will place it on sheet E01. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. for Name. 5 Zoom in to view the section. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click Training Files.rvt. and click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 2 Right-click the copy. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

6 Select the section box. and then click the corner where the Top. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and Left sides converge. 7 On the ViewCube. click Home. Back. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then press Esc.

350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Apply View Template. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D Views.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. select 3D HVAC Iso. Walkthroughs. Click OK. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created.

and click to specify the second leader point. 19 Complete the text labels. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Typical.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 15 Using the same method. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. (Right). Move the cursor down and to the left. as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.

26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . type VP to open the instance properties for the view. as shown. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 25 Click OK. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. under Extents.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. click Training Files. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. select the isometric view. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the view name. Use detail lines to create a detail group. For Scale. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.29 In the drawing area. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. select 3" = 1'-0". Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Place a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click Properties. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.rvt.

11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Plumbing. select Documentation. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. For View Classification. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. as shown. 12 On the Element panel. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 9 Zoom in to the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. as the rectangle start point. 13 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. click the point at the top of the drain. for Sub-Discipline.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

select the filled region.I. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.P. and click OK. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. for Type. 23 In the drawing area. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. (Line). 20 Select 1. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. and then press Esc. 22 Click Modify. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 18 With the filled region still selected. 21 In the drawing area. select C.

and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then click to select them. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.

Drafting Detail Components | 357 . Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. (Rectangle). 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. as shown. 40 Click Finish Region. 45 Using the method learned previously. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. and then select the side of the slab above the line.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the Flashing Membrane group. 52 In the Create Group dialog. and then click to select them. and click OK.D. draw wide detail lines as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. for Name.. 49 Click Modify. press Tab to highlight the chain. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. as shown. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. enter Flashing Membrane_F.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.62 Press Esc twice. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 67 On the Options Bar. 71 Click Modify. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select Leader and Free End. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 72 If necessary. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click OK.

Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 78 Move the cursor to the left. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 81 Select the text note. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 76 To select the leader start point.

84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. open P103 . 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 90 Press Esc. and click to place it. select the view title.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .

364 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Black and White. For Import units. For Colors. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select Visible. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. select 3. click Training Files. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click Open. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Auto-Detect. for Line Weight. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. you import a CAD detail drawing.dwg. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. For A-----NPP. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. For Layers.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Click OK.

select the viewport title. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 .8 Type ZF. 12 In the drawing area. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 11 Press Esc. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful